Chevrolet 2010 Impala Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2010-Chevrolet-Impala-Owners-Manual-813968 chevrolet-2010-chevrolet-impala-owners-manual-813968 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 422

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2010 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual
In Brief ........................................................... 1-1
Instrument Panel ........................................ 1-2
Initial Drive Information
............................... 1-4
Vehicle Features
...................................... 1-15
Performance and Maintenance
................... 1-19
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 2-1
Head Restraints ......................................... 2-2
Front Seats ............................................... 2-4
Rear Seats .............................................. 2-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 2-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 2-32
Airbag System
......................................... 2-56
Restraint System Check
............................ 2-74
Features and Controls ..................................... 3-1
Keys
........................................................ 3-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 3-9
Windows ................................................. 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 3-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 3-19
Mirrors .................................................... 3-33

Universal Home Remote System
................ 3-35
Storage Areas
......................................... 3-42
Sunroof
.................................................. 3-43
Instrument Panel ............................................. 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 4-3
Climate Controls
...................................... 4-16
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 4-21
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 4-37
Audio System(s) ....................................... 4-57
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 5-2
Towing
................................................... 5-26
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 6-1
Service ..................................................... 6-3
Fuel ......................................................... 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 6-12
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 6-43
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 6-43
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 6-49

Tires
...................................................... 6-51
Appearance Care
..................................... 6-87
Vehicle Identification
................................. 6-95
Electrical System ...................................... 6-95
Capacities and Specifications
................... 6-100
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 7-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 7-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 8-18
Index ................................................................ 1

Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the IMPALA
Emblem, and the name IMPALA are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123

This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle either because they are options
that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent
to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the
purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle
to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
‘‘General Motors of Canada Limited’’ for Chevrolet Motor
Division wherever it appears in this manual.

Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com

Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25896384 A First Printing

2009 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii

Safety Warnings and Symbols

A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”

Warning Messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid
or reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.

{ WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Fuel Gage

Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.

Fuses

Airbag Readiness Light

Air Conditioning

Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®

Brake System Warning Light

":
I:

Charging System
Cruise Control

Engine Coolant Temperature

Exterior Lamps

Fog Lamps

i:
j:

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

LATCH System Child Restraints

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Oil Pressure

Power

Remote Vehicle Start

Safety Belt Reminders

Tire Pressure Monitor

Traction Control

Windshield Washer Fluid

✍ NOTES

Section 1
Instrument Panel ..............................................1-2
Initial Drive Information ....................................1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................1-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................1-4
Door Locks ....................................................1-5
Trunk Release ...............................................1-5
Windows .......................................................1-6
Seat Adjustment .............................................1-6
Second Row Seats .........................................1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment ...............................1-8
Safety Belt ....................................................1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag ...............1-9
Mirror Adjustment .........................................1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................1-11
Interior Lighting ............................................1-11
Exterior Lighting ...........................................1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer ...............................1-13
Climate Controls ...........................................1-14

In Brief
Vehicle Features .............................................1-15
Radio(s) ......................................................1-15
Satellite Radio ..............................................1-16
Portable Audio Devices ..................................1-16
Steering Wheel Controls ................................1-17
Bluetooth® ...................................................1-17
Cruise Control ..............................................1-18
Power Outlets ..............................................1-18
Performance and Maintenance .........................1-19
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................1-19
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................1-19
Tire Pressure Monitor ....................................1-20
Engine Oil Life System ..................................1-20
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ................................1-20
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .....................1-21
Roadside Assistance Program ........................1-21
OnStar® ......................................................1-22

1-1

Instrument Panel

1-2

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4-20.
B. Remote Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on
page 3-12.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4-4.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4-22.
E. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4-37.
G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-25.
H. Audio System(s) on page 4-57.
I. Exterior Lamps on page 4-9.
J. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-11.
K. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7
(If Equipped).

L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.

Tilt Wheel on page 4-3.
Cruise Control on page 4-6.
Hood Release on page 6-13.
Horn on page 4-3.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-84
(If Equipped).
Ignition Positions on page 3-20.
Climate Control System on page 4-16.
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4-15.
Center Console Shift Lever (If Equipped).
See Shifting Into Park on page 3-28.
Glove Box on page 3-42.

1-3

Initial Drive Information

Press

This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.

Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.

For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.

Press

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System

the panic alarm.

The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors.

Q to lock all doors.

Press and hold
open the trunk.

V for approximately one second to

L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
Press

L again to cancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 3-3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3-4.

Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press

3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system
may come on.
1-4

The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold

/ until the parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position

Power Door Locks
Power door lock switches are located on the front doors
near the handle.

Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.

For more information, see:

• Power Door Locks on page 3-10.
• Delayed Locking on page 3-10.

and then back to LOCK/OFF.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3-7.

Trunk Release

Door Locks

In addition to the trunk release button on the RKE
transmitter, there is a remote release G button
located on the left side of the instrument panel.

From outside the vehicle, use the key in the door or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock or
unlock the vehicle. From the inside, pull up or push
down on the manual door lock knobs.

For more information see Trunk on page 3-12.

See Door Locks on page 3-9.

1-5

Windows

Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats

On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on
the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has
a switch that controls only that window.
Press the front of the switch to the first position to open
the window. Pull the switch up to close it.
For more information, see Power Windows on
page 3-15.

1-6

1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place.
See Manual Seats on page 2-4.

Power Seats

Power Reclining Seatback

Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.

To raise or recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control forward or rearward.

Raise or lower the front or rear of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the control up or down.

See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2-6.

See Power Seats on page 2-5.

1-7

Manual Lumbar

Second Row Seats
On vehicles with the Flip and Fold feature, the bottom
seat cushions can be flipped forward and the seatback
folded down to create an extended cargo area.
The vehicle also has an under seat storage area.
See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 2-10 for more
information.

Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on page 2-2.
Increase or decrease the lumbar support by repeatedly
pushing down or pulling up on the lever.
See Manual Lumbar on page 2-5.

1-8

Safety Belt

Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbags, seat-side impact airbags, and
roof-rail airbags are not affected by this.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.

Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.

•
•
•
•
•

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2-12.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2-17.

United States

Canada

See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-66 for
important information.

Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-25.
Lap Belt on page 2-30.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2-43.

1-9

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with a manual rearview mirror can be adjusted
by holding the mirror in the center to move it for a
clearer view behind the vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Pull the lever,
located at the bottom of the mirror for nighttime use.
Return the lever to its original position for the day
position.

Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door armrest.

Vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror will
automatically adjust to reduce the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 3-33.

Press the left or right side of the selector located
beneath the control pad to adjust the driver or passenger
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the mirror
to the desired direction.

1-10

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Interior Lighting
Dome Lamp
The center mounted dome lamp overhead comes on
when a door is opened. This lamp can also be turned on
by turning the instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.

Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the
dome lamp. Press the button near each lamp to turn
them on and off.

Map Lamps

The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the wheel and pull the lever towards you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.

The vehicle has map lamps on the rearview mirror.
Push the button near each lamp to turn the map lamps
on and off.
For more information on interior lighting, see:

•
•
•
•
•

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-11.
Courtesy Lamps on page 4-11.
Delayed Entry Lighting on page 4-12.
Delayed Exit Lighting on page 4-13.
Parade Dimming on page 4-13.

See Tilt Wheel on page 4-3.
1-11

Exterior Lighting

AUTO: Automatic operation of the headlamps and
other exterior lamps at normal brightness.

; : Turns on the the parking lamps and other exterior
lamps.
2:

Turns on the headlamps and other exterior lamps.

# (If Equipped):

Turns on the fog lamps.

For more information, see:
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel.

P : Briefly turn to this position to manually turn the
automatic lamp control and Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) off or on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
off position only works when the vehicle is shifted
into the P (Park) position.

1-12

• Exterior Lamps on page 4-9.
• Fog Lamps on page 4-11.
• Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System on page 4-10.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.

6:
?:

Slow wipes.
Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever, there is a paddle
with L on it. Push the paddle to spray washer fluid on
the windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4-5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4-6.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.

Use for a single wiping cycle.

Turns the windshield wipers off.

1-13

Climate Controls
This vehicle may have a dual or single climate control
system. The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and
ventilation can be controlled with either of these systems.

Single Zone

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
A.
B.
C.
D.

Fan Control
Outside Air
Recirculation
Air Delivery Mode
Control
E. Air Conditioning
F. Driver and
Passenger
Heated Seats

1-14

G. Driver and
Passenger
Temperature
Controls
H. Rear Window
Defogger

A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
C. Temperature
Control
D. Recirculation

E. Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window
Defogger

See Climate Control System on page 4-16.

Vehicle Features

Seek or scan stations.

4 : Press to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or
WMA song. If information is available during XM, CD,
MP3 or WMA playback, the song title information
displays on the top line of the display and artist
information displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “No Info” displays.

Radio(s)

For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4-57.

Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.

Radio with CD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2 and AM on
the Radio with CD. The selection displays. Press to
switch between FM, AM, and XM™ on the Radio with
CD (MP3).

For radios with a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations
can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the
radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to six
pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations.
For radios without a FAV button, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed
on the six numbered buttons.
See Radio(s) on page 4-59.

Select radio stations.
1-15

Setting the Clock

Satellite Radio

To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3):

XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.

1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
4. Increase or decrease the time or date by
turning f clockwise or counterclockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
page 4-58.

A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:

• www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
• www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s)
on page 4-59.

Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack, located
on the audio faceplate. External devices such as iPod®,
MP3 players, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary
input jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” under Radio(s) on
page 4-59.

1-16

Steering Wheel Controls
If equipped, these controls
are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.

c x: Press to go to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite, the next track if a CD is playing, to
reject an incoming call, or end a current call.
SRCE: Press to choose between the radio, CD, and
auxiliary input jack.
+

−

Increases or decreases volume.

¨:

Press to go to the next radio station while in AM,
FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4-84.

Bluetooth®
w: Press to go to the next radio station stored as a
favorite, or the next track if a CD is playing.
b g: Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press
again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with the OnStar® or
Bluetooth systems, if equipped.

For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in
the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4-74.

1-17

Cruise Control

Power Outlets
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.

The vehicle has three 12-volt outlets to use with
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
On vehicles with a center console, one outlet is located
inside the center floor console and two outlets are
located at the front of the console bin under the
instrument panel. Lift the cover to access the outlet.
On vehicles without a center console, two are located
under the climate controls and another outlet for the rear
seat passengers is at the rear of the center front seat.
Remove the cover to access the outlets.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4-15.

On/Off.

RES+: Press to resume or accelerate speed.
SET−: Press to set or decrease speed.

Press to cancel cruise control.

For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4-6.

1-18

Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system turns on automatically
every time the vehicle is started.

• For vehicles with traction control, press and
release i on the instrument panel to turn off
traction control. F illuminates and the appropriate
DIC message displays. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-44.

• For vehicles with traction control and electronic

stability control, press and release 5 on the
instrument panel to turn off traction control.
F illuminates and the appropriate DIC message
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-44.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.

• To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold 5 on the
instrument panel until F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-44.

• Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5-6.

• Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-7.

1-19

Tire Pressure Monitor

Engine Oil Life System

This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).

The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.

The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure
is corrected. The proper tire pressures for your
vehicle are listed on the Tire and Loading Information
label located on the driver side center pillar (B pillar).
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is first
started and then turn off as you drive. This may be an
early indicator that your tire pressures are getting low
and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low
tire pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly
tire maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-60 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-62.
1-20

Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
or the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on page 6-5. In all other
engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described
under Gasoline Octane on page 6-6.
Vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K) or
the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M) have a yellow fuel
cap and can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6-8.

Driving for Better Fuel Economy

Roadside Assistance Program

Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)

•
•
•
•

Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.

• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.

Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

1-21

OnStar®

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to
the vehicle to see if you need help.

How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.

1-22

X : Push this button for hands-free, voice-activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn-by-turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Assistance,
Turn-by-Turn Navigation and Hands-Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more information see the
OnStar Owner’s Guide or visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.

The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed, or
if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual advisor
feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the vehicle
also sends OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can
provide services where it is located.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.

OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-84 for more
information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.

Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request
a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.

1-23

✍ NOTES

1-24

Section 2

Seats and Restraint System

Head Restraints ...............................................2-2
Front Seats ......................................................2-4
Manual Seats ................................................2-4
Power Seats ..................................................2-5
Manual Lumbar ..............................................2-5
Heated Seats .................................................2-6
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................2-6
Center Seat ...................................................2-9
Rear Seats .....................................................2-10
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................2-10
Safety Belts ...................................................2-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................2-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................2-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................2-30
Lap Belt ......................................................2-30
Safety Belt Extender .....................................2-31
Child Restraints .............................................2-32
Older Children ..............................................2-32
Infants and Young Children ............................2-35
Child Restraint Systems .................................2-39

Where to Put the Restraint .............................2-42
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................2-43
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................2-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ....................................2-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................2-52
Airbag System ...............................................2-56
Where Are the Airbags? ................................2-59
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................2-61
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................2-63
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................2-63
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....2-64
Passenger Sensing System ............................2-66
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........2-72
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................2-73
Restraint System Check ..................................2-74
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................2-75

2-1

Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.

2-2

Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.

2-3

Front Seats
Manual Seats

{ WARNING:

If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.

2-4

Power Seats

The driver seat may have power reclining seatbacks.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
Seatbacks on page 2-6 for more information.

Manual Lumbar

Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat
Control, and Power Recline shown
On vehicles with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats. To adjust the seat:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.

Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar shown
On vehicles with manual lumbar, the lever is located on
the outboard side of the driver seat near the front of
the seat cushion. Lift up or push down on the lever
repeatedly to increase or decrease lumbar support.

2-5

Heated Seats

Reclining Seatbacks
On vehicles with this
feature, the buttons that
control the driver and front
passenger heated seats
are located on the climate
control panel. See Climate
Control System on
page 4-16.

Press the button to turn on the seat at the high setting.
Both lights below the heated seat symbol are lit.
Press the button a second time to turn the seat to the
low setting. Only the bottom light is lit. Press the button
a third time to turn the heated seat off.
The heated seat feature must be turned on again each
time the ignition is turned off and back on.

2-6

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.

To operate a manual reclining seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
Passenger Seat with Manual Recline and Power
Seat Control shown

2-7

Power Reclining Seatback

{ WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.

Driver Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat
Control, and Power Recline shown
The driver seat may have a power reclining seatback.
The control used to operate it is located on the outboard
side of the seat cushion rear of the horizontal power
seat control.

• Press the control rearward to recline the seatback.
• Press the control forward to raise the seatback.

2-8

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.

Center Seat

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.

The vehicle may have a front center seat. There are
cupholders on the underside of the seat cushion. To use
them, flip the seat cushion forward. The seat can also
be used as a storage area by lowering the seatback.
See Center Console Storage on page 3-42.
The seatback doubles as an armrest for the driver or
front passenger when the center seat is unoccupied.

2-9

Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Flip and Fold Feature
On vehicles with this feature, you can flip the bottom
seat cushion(s) forward and fold the seatback(s) down to
create an extended flat cargo area.
To use this feature:
1. Make sure the front seats are not reclined. If they
are, the seat cushion will not flip forward completely.

2. Flip the bottom seat cushion forward by pulling up
on the tab located in the center of the seat cushion
where the seatback meets the seat cushion.

2-10

3. Lower the seatback(s)
by pulling forward on
the tab located on
the outboard side of the
seatback(s).

{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.

To return the seats to the normal position:

2. Ensure that the safety belts are properly stowed
over the seatback in all three positions.
3. Flip the bottom seat cushion back into place. Push
firmly on the seat cushion to make sure it is secure.
When the seat is not in use, the seatback should
be placed in an upright, locked position, and the seat
cushion should be in the down position.

Under Seat Storage
The vehicle also has an under seat storage area.

1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.

To access the storage area, lift up on the tab located in
the center of the bottom seat cushion where the seat
cushion meets the seatback. See Rear Storage Area on
page 3-42 for more information.
2-11

Safety Belts

{ WARNING:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.

2-12

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-23
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.

2-13

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.

2-14

The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

2-15

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.

2-16

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2-32
or Infants and Young Children on page 2-35. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
2-17

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.

2-18

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.

2-19

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

2-20

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

2-21

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

2-22

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

2-23

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

2-24

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position, if
your vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap
Belt on page 2-30 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2-66.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2-31.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

2-25

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage
can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.

2-26

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has shoulder belt height adjusters for the
driver and right front passenger positions.

This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.

Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 2-75.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.

This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides
for each outboard passenger position in the rear seat. If
not, they are available through your dealer/retailer. The
guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older
children who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the comfort
guide positions the belt away from the neck and head.

2-27

Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Pull the guide out from the pocket on the edge
of the seatback.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

2-28

{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into the storage
pocket on the edge of the seatback.

2-29

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Lap Belt

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to
wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt
on page 2-25.
The vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have
a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-30

To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.

2-31

Child Restraints
Older Children

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2-25 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

2-32

length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-25.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

2-33

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

2-34

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.

2-35

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

2-36

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.

2-37

Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?

{ WARNING:

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

2-38

To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.

A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.

2-39

A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.

2-40

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle

{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2-43 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint

{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.

2-41

Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

2-42

(Continued)

WARNING:

(Continued)

inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-66 for
additional information.

{ WARNING:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.

2-43

Lower Anchors

Top Tether Anchor

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.

2-44

Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.

To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.

To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.

Rear Seat

2-45

The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel behind each head restraint.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint
will be placed.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2-42 for
additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System

{ WARNING:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.

2-46

{ WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.

2-47

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Push on the depression at the rear of the
cover and swing the lid open to expose the
top tether anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.

2-48

If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.

When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2-42.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

2-49

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

2-50

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-43 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.

2-51

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position

{ WARNING:

This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2-42.

A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.

In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2-66 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4-25 for more information,
including important safety information.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.

2-52

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-66 for
additional information.

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2-43 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-43 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the
off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is
started. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 4-25.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2-53

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

2-54

If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2-66 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

2-55

Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:

•
•
•
•

A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger
seated directly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.

2-56

All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:

{ WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-61.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.

{ WARNING:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.

2-57

{ WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2-32 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2-35.

2-58

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-24
for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

2-59

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.

2-60

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling
above the side windows.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?

{ WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.

2-61

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

2-62

The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 2-56.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rollovers
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side
of the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side
impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?

How Does an Airbag Restrain?

In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.

In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2-61 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.

2-63

What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-63.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.

2-64

{ WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior lamps
and hazard warning flashers by using the controls for
those features.

{ WARNING:

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.

A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an

Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.

• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic

airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 8-19.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.

2-65

Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbags,
and roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-25.

2-66

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-25.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.

2-67

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.

2-68

{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-24
for more information, including important safety
information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 2-52.

5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2-2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off
the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending
upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

2-69

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant

If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.

2-70

Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2-73 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system operates.

A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:

• The passenger sensing system may turn off the
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit,
and the airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.

• Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked
in may make it more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn on) the passenger
airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is
on the seat. If the passenger airbag is turned on,
the on indicator will be lit.

2-71

If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat immediately.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not install a child
restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4-24 for important safety
information.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.

{ WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.

2-72

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 8-17.

{ WARNING:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s

could also interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-66.
If you have any questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.

frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get

In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric,

In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.

my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.

2-73

Restraint System Check

Airbags

Checking the Restraint Systems

The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4-24 for more information.

Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-23 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6-90.

2-74

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-63. See
your dealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

{ WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-24.

2-75

✍ NOTES

2-76

Section 3

Features and Controls

Keys ...............................................................3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................3-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................3-7
Doors and Locks .............................................3-9
Door Locks ....................................................3-9
Power Door Locks ........................................3-10
Delayed Locking ...........................................3-10
Automatic Door Lock .....................................3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............3-11
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................3-11
Lockout Protection ........................................3-12
Trunk ..........................................................3-12
Windows ........................................................3-14
Power Windows ............................................3-15
Sun Visors ...................................................3-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................3-18

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................3-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................3-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................3-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................3-21
Starting the Engine .......................................3-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................3-23
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................3-24
Parking Brake ..............................................3-27
Shifting Into Park ..........................................3-28
Shifting Out of Park ......................................3-29
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................3-30
Engine Exhaust ............................................3-31
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................3-32
Mirrors ...........................................................3-33
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................3-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................3-33
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................3-34
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................3-34
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................3-34
Universal Home Remote System ......................3-35
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) ............................3-35

3-1

Section 3

Features and Controls

Storage Areas ................................................3-42
Glove Box ...................................................3-42
Cupholders ..................................................3-42
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................3-42
Center Console Storage .................................3-42

3-2

Rear Storage Area ........................................3-42
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................3-42
Convenience Net ..........................................3-42
Sunroof .........................................................3-43

Keys

{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition and the driver’s door.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8-7 for more information.
3-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation

See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3-4.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:

• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.

3-4

With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the vehicle
using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 3-7 for additional information.

Q (Lock):

Press to lock all the doors. If enabled through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps
flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn chirps when Q is pressed again
within five seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 4-51 for additional information.
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3-17.

" (Unlock):

Press once to unlock the driver door. If " is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 4-51.
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3-17.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The transmission
must be in P (Park).

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and the
horn sounds three times. Press and hold L for more
than two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn
signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for
30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition
must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters
programmed to it. See “Remote Key” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4-37.

3-5

Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-44 for additional
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.

3-6

Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN.

/ (Remote Start):

This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release Q , then immediately press and
hold / for two to four seconds or until the vehicle’s
turn signal lamps flash. The doors will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

The remote start feature provides two separate starts per
ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine running
time, or one start with a time extension. The first start
must expire or be canceled to get two separate 10 minute
starts.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
and only after the first remote start.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3-4

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

3-7

The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle’s
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must
be turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 3-20 for information regarding the
ignition positions on your vehicle.

3-8

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The remote start system is disabled through the DIC.
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
The vehicle’s hood is open.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4-31.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
The content theft-deterrent alarm has been activated.
Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.

Doors and Locks

WARNING:

Door Locks

(Continued)

• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles

{ WARNING:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
WARNING:

(Continued)

•

may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.

From the outside, use the key in the driver door or use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock
and unlock the vehicle. From the inside, use the manual
or power door locks.
To lock or unlock the driver side door from the outside
with the key, insert the key and turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise.
To lock or unlock the door from the inside, push or pull
the manual lock knob.

3-9

Power Door Locks

Delayed Locking
A power door lock switch
is located on both front
doors next to the door
handle.

This feature allows the driver to delay the actual locking
of the doors. When the driver power door lock switch is
pressed with the key removed from the ignition, and the
driver door open, a chime will sound three times to signal
that the delayed locking system is active. When all doors
have been closed, the doors will lock automatically after
several seconds. If any door is opened before this, the
timer will reset itself once all the doors have been closed
again.
Pressing the driver or passenger power door lock switch
again or the RKE transmitter button will override this
feature.

Personal Choice Programming
Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors or press
the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.
If the vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system and it is armed, the power door lock switches will
be disabled. You must use the RKE transmitter or the
key to unlock the doors when the system is armed.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3-17.

The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off,
using the Driver Information Center (DIC) to program
this feature. See “DELAY DOOR LOCK” under DIC
Vehicle Customization on page 4-51.

Automatic Door Lock
The doors will automatically lock when the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park). The automatic door locking
feature cannot be disabled.

3-10

Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock

To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle has the
following:

The vehicle is programmed so that when the shift lever
is moved into P (Park) all doors will unlock.
With the vehicle stopped and the engine running, door
unlocking can be programmed through prompts displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These prompts
allow the driver to choose various unlock settings. For
programming information, see DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 4-51.

Rear Door Security Locks
Rear door security locks prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be opened
to access them.

To use the lock:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.

3-11

To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.

Lockout Protection
This feature helps prevent you from locking the doors
while the key is in the ignition. Always remember to take
your key with you when exiting the vehicle.
If the lock switch is pressed on the door that is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the open door will unlock. A chime sounds
continuously until the driver door is closed.

Trunk

{ WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-31.

3-12

Trunk Release
To open the trunk from the outside, press the trunk
release button on the RKE transmitter, if equipped.

Remote Trunk Release
G (Remote Trunk Release): Press the button
located next to the exterior lamps control on the left side
of the instrument panel to open the trunk. The shift
lever must be in P (Park).
The trunk can also be opened by lowering the rear seat
and pulling the emergency trunk release handle located
inside the trunk. See Split Folding Rear Seat on
page 2-10 and “Emergency Trunk Release Handle”
following.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
on the latch inside the trunk. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the release handle to
open the trunk from the inside.

3-13

Windows

{ WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.

3-14

Power Windows

{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.

The switches on the driver door armrest are used to
control each of the windows. Each passenger door has
its own window switch.
The power window switches work while the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or while Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3-21.
To lower the window, press and hold the front of
the switch to the first position until the window is at
the desired level. To raise the window, pull up and
hold the front of the switch.

3-15

Express-Down Window

Sun Visors

The driver window switch has an express-down feature
labeled AUTO. This lets you lower the window completely
without holding the switch. Press the front of the switch to
the second position and release.

To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. They
can be detached from the center retainer and slid along
the rod to cover different areas of the front window
and turned to cover the side windows.

To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pull up
on the switch.

Visor Vanity Mirror

Window Lockout

On vehicles with this feature, swing down the sun visors
and lift the cover to expose the vanity mirror. Do not
drive with the cover lifted due to possible glare impeding
other drivers behind or to the side of the vehicle.

o (Window Lockout): The driver window switches also
include a lockout switch. Press the right side of the switch
to prevent the rear passengers from using their window
switches. The driver can still control all the windows and
the front passenger can control their own window with the
lockout on. Press the left side of the switch to return to
normal window operation. A red bar on the right side of
the switch indicates that the lockout is off.

3-16

Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Arming with the Power Lock Switch

Your vehicle may have the optional content
theft-deterrent alarm system.

The alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lock the doors while any door is open and
the key is removed from the ignition. The alarm system
will not arm if the truck is open when you use either power
lock switch to lock the doors.

To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch
or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If you are using the RKE transmitter, the door
does not need to be open.
3. Close all doors.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle without using the RKE transmitter
or a key or turns the ignition on with an incorrect key.
The horn will sound and the turn signal lamps will flash
for about 30 seconds.
When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be opened
with the RKE transmitter. The power door lock switches
are disabled and the doors remain locked. You must
use your RKE transmitter or your key to unlock the doors
when the system is armed.

Arming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when you use your RKE
transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is not in
the ignition.

Disarming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when you use your RKE
transmitter to unlock the doors.
The first time a remote unlock command is received,
three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps heard to
indicate an alarm condition has occurred since last
arming.

Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when you use your key to
unlock the doors or insert your key in the ignition and
turn it from the LOCK/OFF position.

3-17

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

3-18

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 6-96. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle

To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a

1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.

New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:

3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or

4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 5-28 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.

3-19

Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.

A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. This is the only position in
which the ignition key can be inserted or removed.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from left to
right while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate the radio and windshield wipers
while the engine is off. To use ACC/ACCESSORY,
turn the key clockwise.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
and the brake pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.

3-20

C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.

D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and the key is in
the ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-44 for more information.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine turned off:

• Audio System
• Power Windows

The radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF the radio will continue to
work 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
The power windows will continue to work for up to
10 minutes or until any door is opened.

Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.

3-21

Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.

3-22

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is attached to the underside of the
diagonal brace, which is located above the
engine air cleaner/filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts, and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.

3-23

Automatic Transmission Operation
The automatic transmission has a shift lever on the
steering column or on the console between the seats.

{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 5-28.

There is a display, located on the instrument panel
cluster that will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.
Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic
transmission vehicles while in P (Park) or N (Neutral) to
protect driveline components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is
the best position to use when the engine is started
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
3-24

Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brakes first, then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from P (Park) while the
ignition is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park),
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park on page 3-29.

R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow on page 5-19.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear and
the vehicle will have more power.

{ WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.

3-25

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 5-11.
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have the
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed more than
D (Drive) without using the brakes. You might choose
3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,
winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less
shifting between gears and when going down a
steep hill.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle speed
as you go down steep mountain roads. You would also
want to use the brakes off and on.

3-26

Notice: Driving in 2 (Second) for more than 25 miles
(40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h) may
damage the transmission. Also, shifting into
2 (Second) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)
can cause damage. Drive in 3 (Third) or D (Drive)
instead of 2 (Second).
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is in 1 (First) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Parking Brake

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and push the parking brake pedal. When you lift
your foot off the parking brake pedal, the pedal will
follow it to the released position.
A warning chime will sound and a brake warning light
located on the instrument panel cluster will come
on, if the parking brake is set, the ignition is on and
the vehicle speed is greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.

The parking brake is located to the left of the brake
pedal, near the driver door.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 5-28.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push down the parking brake pedal.

3-27

Shifting Into Park

Steering Column Shift Lever
If the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the shift
lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go.

3-28

3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 3-27 for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Console Shift Lever
If the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever, use
this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set the
parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3-27
for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running

{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.

Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it
is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” in this section.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of Park
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. See Parking Brake
on page 3-27 for more information.

The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in P (Park)

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.

3-29

The shift lock is always functional except in the case of a
an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6-39.

Column Shift
If the column shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park):
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.

Console Shift

2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position. See
Ignition Positions on page 3-20 for more information.

If the console shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park):

3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to the N (Neutral)
position.

1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN position. See Ignition
Positions on page 3-20 for more information.
3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shift
lever is pushed all the way into P (Park).
4. Press the shift lever button

4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.

Parking Over Things That Burn

5. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.

{ WARNING:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.

3-30

Engine Exhaust

WARNING:

(Continued)

• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been

{ WARNING:

modified, damaged or improperly repaired.

Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
WARNING:

• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.

(Continued)

3-31

Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-31.

{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3-28.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5-28.

3-32

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

Manual Rearview Mirror

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with the OnStar® System.

Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Pull the lever, located at the bottom of the mirror
for nighttime use. Return the lever to its original position
for the day position.
If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See
your dealer/retailer for more information about OnStar®
and how to subscribe to it. See the OnStar® owner’s
guide for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.

Press the button located below the mirror, on the far
left, for up to three seconds to turn the dimming feature
off and on.
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it
on and off.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more information
about OnStar® and how to subscribe to it. See the
OnStar® owner’s guide for more information about the
service OnStar® provides.

3-33

Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door armrest.

Outside Convex Mirror

{ WARNING:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.

1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch
located beneath the control pad, to select the
driver or passenger mirror.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.

2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.

Outside Heated Mirrors

3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.

For vehicles with heated mirrors:

Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.

3-34

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
outside rearview mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger”
under Climate Control System on page 4-16 for more
information.

Universal Home Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.

Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)

This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.

This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.

Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being
programmed.

3-35

Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code

To program up to three devices:

For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.

3-36

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.

3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.

To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing
a different function button in Step 3 than what was
used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.

3-37

Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code

To program up to three devices:

For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.

1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
3-38

The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the
dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch
settings on the motor head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch
settings can also be used when the original hand
held transmitter is not available.

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions

• A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
3-39

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 will
now become the button strokes to be entered into
the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two
and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:

• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.

• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
3-40

5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.

Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons

6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button may need to be
held for up to 55 seconds.

Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.

7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.

The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.

8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for
the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8-6.

3-41

Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.

Cupholders
Cupholders may be built into the front center console,
front portion of the front center seat, and rear armrest of
the vehicle.

Sunglasses Storage Compartment
A storage compartment for sunglasses may be located
above the rearview mirror. Push on cover to open
the compartment.

Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a front center console storage area,
open it by pulling up on the latch located in the front of
the console cover.

3-42

Rear Storage Area
For vehicles with a split folding rear seat, there are two
storage areas underneath. Pull the tab(s) located by
the passenger side safety belt buckle and the driver
side rear seat to access the storage areas. See
Split Folding Rear Seat on page 2-10 for more
information.

Rear Seat Armrest
For vehicles with a rear seat armrest, pull the tab on the
armrest forward to access it.

Convenience Net
For vehicles with a convenience net, it is located in
the rear. Use it to store small loads as far forward as
possible. The net should not be used to store heavy
loads.

Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the sunroof switches are
located on the overhead
console.

Q (Vent/Express-Open): Press this switch once to
vent the sunroof when it is closed. When using the vent,
the sunshade should be fully opened. The sunshade
can be opened or closed manually by sliding it rearward
or forward.
From the vent position, press this switch again to
activate the express-open feature. Press the close
switch to stop movement of the sunroof. The sunshade
will automatically open when using express-open.
A deflector will automatically pop up when the sunroof is
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof is
closed.

The sunroof can only be operated when the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3-21.

R (Close):

Press and hold this switch until the sunroof
motor stops to close the sunroof, or release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.

3-43

✍ NOTES

3-44

Section 4

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................4-3
Horn .............................................................4-3
Tilt Wheel .....................................................4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................4-5
Flash-to-Pass .................................................4-5
Windshield Wipers ..........................................4-5
Windshield Washer .........................................4-6
Cruise Control ................................................4-6
Exterior Lamps ...............................................4-9
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System ......................................4-10
Fog Lamps ..................................................4-11
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................4-11
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................4-11
Dome Lamp .................................................4-11
Entry Lighting ...............................................4-12
Delayed Entry Lighting ...................................4-12
Delayed Exit Lighting .....................................4-13
Parade Dimming ...........................................4-13
Reading Lamps ............................................4-13
Map Lamps .................................................4-13
Electric Power Management ...........................4-13

Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................4-14
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................4-15
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................4-16
Climate Controls ............................................4-16
Climate Control System .................................4-16
Outlet Adjustment .........................................4-20
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................4-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............4-21
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................4-22
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................4-23
Tachometer .................................................4-23
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................4-23
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................4-24
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................4-25
Charging System Light ..................................4-26
Brake System Warning Light ..........................4-27
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light ........................................................4-28
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning
Light ........................................................4-28
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light .........4-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......4-30
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................4-30
Tire Pressure Light .......................................4-31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................4-31

4-1

Section 4

Instrument Panel

Oil Pressure Light .........................................4-34
Security Light ...............................................4-35
Fog Lamp Light ............................................4-35
Cruise Control Light ......................................4-35
Highbeam On Light .......................................4-36
Fuel Gage ...................................................4-36
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................4-37
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................4-37
DIC Compass ..............................................4-42
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................4-44
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................4-51

4-2

Audio System(s) .............................................4-57
Setting the Clock ..........................................4-58
Radio(s) ......................................................4-59
Using an MP3 ..............................................4-68
XM Radio Messages .....................................4-72
Bluetooth® ...................................................4-74
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................4-84
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................4-84
Radio Reception ...........................................4-85
Backglass Antenna .......................................4-86
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............4-86

Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let you warn others that
you have a problem.
The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of
the steering column.

Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows the steering wheel to be adjusted
before driving. The steering wheel can be raised to
the highest level for more room when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.

| : Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.

Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.

To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel to a comfortable position
and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

4-3

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

Turn and Lane Change Signals

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

Windshield Wipers

LQ:

Windshield Washer

Flash-to-Pass.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 4-9.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. If the lever is briefly pressed
and released, the turn signal flashes three times.
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb might be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6-96

Turn Signal On Chime

Windshield Wipers

If either one of the turn signals are left on and the
vehicle has been driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km),
a chime will sound.

Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition is
in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that
you want to pass.
If the headlamps are off or in the low-beam position,
pull the turn signal lever toward you to momentarily
switch to high-beams.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8 , then release.
Several wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
9 (Off):

Turns the windshield wipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band up for
more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.
6 (Low Speed):

Slow wipes.

? (High Speed):

Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6-49.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.

Release the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.

4-5

Windshield Washer

Cruise Control

At the top of the multifunction lever, there is a paddle
with L on it. Push the paddle to spray washer fluid on
the windshield. The wipers run for several sweeps and
then either stop or return to the preset speed. The ignition
key must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for this to
work. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6-33.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ WARNING:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
When the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the WASHER
FLUID LOW ADD FLUID displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) for 60 seconds. When the
ignition is turned off, this message displays again for
three seconds to remind you that the fluid level is low.
Until the fluid reservoir is refilled, every time the vehicle
is started, the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
for 60 seconds. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-44.
4-6

{ WARNING:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use the cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
and the cruise control is on, TCS will begin to limit
wheel spin and the cruise control automatically turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7. When
road conditions allow you to safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.

The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.

Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed. See Instrument Panel Cluster
on page 4-22.

{ WARNING:
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise control on and off.
The indicator is lit when cruise control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
SET– : Press to set the speed or make the vehicle
decelerate.

[ (Cancel):

Press to cancel cruise control.

If you leave your cruise control on when you are not
using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.

1. Press the

T button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

4-7

Resuming a Set Speed
If cruise control is set at a desired speed and the
brakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise control.
However, it does not need to be reset.
Once your vehicle reaches a speed of about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle goes back to the previously
selected speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
will slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brakes
are applied the cruise control will turn off.

4-8

Ending Cruise Control

It controls the following systems:

There are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
• Press the T button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased by
turning off the cruise control or the ignition.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off):

Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.

Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp
control to the off position again will turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, the off position only works when the vehicle
is shifted into the P (Park) position.

AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:

•
•
•
•

Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps

4-9

; (Parking Lamps):

Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:

• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the following lamps listed below. When the headlamps
are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps will
turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the
vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes
before automatically turning off to prevent the battery
from being drained. Turn the headlamp control to off
and then back to the headlamp on position to make
the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes.
•
•
•
•

Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):
lamps.
See Fog Lamps on page 4-11.

4-10

Turns on the fog

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The engine is running.
When the DRL are on, the regular headlamps, taillamps,
sidemarker, and other lamps are not on. The instrument
panel and cluster are also not on.
The headlamps automatically change from DRL to
the regular headlamps depending on the darkness of
the surroundings. The other lamps that come on with
the headlamps will also come on.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps go off
and the DRL come on.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Do not cover the light sensor on top of the instrument
panel because it works with the DRL.

Fog Lamps

Courtesy Lamps

When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually
turn these lamps on by fully turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
lamps to come on.

The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.

(Fog Lamps): For vehicles with fog lamps,
the button is located on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.

Press # to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light will
come on in the instrument panel cluster.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.

Dome Lamp
The center mounted dome lamp overhead comes on
when a door is opened. This lamp can also be turned
on by turning the instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.

Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness):

The knob with this
symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps control
to the left of the steering wheel. Push the knob in all the
way until it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lights. Push
the knob back in when finished.

4-11

Entry Lighting

Delayed Entry Lighting

For vehicles with courtesy lamps, they come on and
stay on for a set time whenever the unlock symbol
is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if the vehicle has one.

Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.

If a door is opened, the lamps stay on while it is open
and then turn off automatically about 20 seconds
after the door is closed. If the unlock symbol is pressed
and no door is opened, the lamps turn off after about
20 seconds.
Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming.
With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at
the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim and
then go out. The delay time is canceled if the ignition
key is turned to ON/RUN or the power door lock switch
is pressed. The lamps will dim right away.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps will not come on unless
a door is opened.

4-12

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting
to work. Immediately after all the doors have been
closed, the delayed entry lighting feature continues to
work until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The doors are locked.
• An illumination period of about 25 seconds has
elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period is canceled and the interior
lamps remain on.

Delayed Exit Lighting

Map Lamps

This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.

The vehicle has map lamps on the rearview mirror.
Press the button near each lamp on the mirror to turn
the map lamps on and off.

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work.
When the key is removed, interior illumination activates
and remains on until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The power door locks are activated.
• An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.

Parade Dimming
Parade mode automatically prohibits the dimming of
the instrument panel displays during the daylight while
the headlamps are on so that the displays are still
able to be seen.

Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the
dome lamp. Press the button near each lamp to turn
them on and off.

Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.

4-13

A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery.
It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the
vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle
speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-44.

4-14

Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained,
if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor
vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If any
of these lamps are left on, they automatically turn off after
10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come
back on again until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on
again.
The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are
manually turned on with the ignition on or off.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The vehicle has three 12-volt outlets which can be
used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
On vehicles with a center console, one outlet is located
inside the center floor console and two outlets are located
at the front of the console bin under the instrument panel.
Lift the cover to access the outlet. Close the cover when
not using the outlet.
On vehicles without a center console, two are located
under the climate controls and another outlet for the rear
seat passengers is at the rear of the center front seat.
Remove the cover to access the outlets. When not using
the outlet, make sure the cover is closed.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to the
accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle
and adapter fuses. If you experience a problem, see
your dealer/retailer for additional information on
the power accessory plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the maximum amperage rating of 20 amps.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because the power outlets
are designed for accessory power plugs only.

4-15

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

Climate Controls

The vehicle may have an ashtray and a cigarette lighter.
The ashtray and cigarette lighter may be located in the
console, if the vehicle has one, otherwise, they may be
located in the center armrest of the front seat.

Climate Control System

Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.

This vehicle may have a dual or single climate
control system. The heating, cooling, defrost,
defog and ventilation can be controlled with this
system. For vehicles with heated seats, see Heated
Seats on page 2-6.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
A.
B.
C.
D.

Fan Control
Outside Air
Recirculation
Air Delivery Mode
Control
E. Air Conditioning
4-16

F. Driver and Passenger
Heated Seats
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
H. Rear Window
Defogger

9 (Fan Control):

Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed. Positioning the knob
between two modes, can select a combination of those
modes.

Single Zone
A.
B.
C.
D.

Fan Control
Outside Air
Temperature Control
Recirculation

E. Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window
Defogger

Temperature Control: For dual zone, turn the
thumbwheels up or down to increase or decrease
the temperature on the driver or the passenger side
of the vehicle. For single zone, turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature.

If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter may need to
be replaced. There will be some airflow noticeable from
the various outlets when driving, even with the fan in
the off position. For more information, see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 4-20 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets.

4-17

6 (Floor):

Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some of the air directed to the windshield and side
window outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears the windshield of fog
or moisture. Air is directed equally to the windshield and
the floor outlets. When defog is selected, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is below
40°F (4°C).
0 (Defrost):

This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield with
some air to the side window vents and the floor vents.
When defrost is selected, the system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).

4-18

# (Air Conditioning):

Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that
it is on. The air conditioning can be selected in any mode
as long as the fan is on and the outside temperature is
above freezing. A flashing indicator light indicates that the
air conditioning compressor is currently not available.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

H mode.
Press the # button.

1. Select the
2.

3. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.
4. Select the highest

9 speed.

5. When the coolest temperature is selected in the
A/C mode, the system automatically goes into the
recirculation mode to improve cooling.

Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air inside
the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

Rear Window Defogger

The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water may drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.

< (Rear Window Defogger): The rear window
defogger turns off automatically after it has been
activated for 10 minutes. It can be turned off manually,
by pressing the button again or by turning the ignition
to the LOCK/OFF position. The rear window defogger
can be turned on again for additional window clearing.
The length of defogger operation will increase if the
vehicle is being driven.

: (Outside Air): Press to turn on outside air.
An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.
Outside air will circulate throughout the vehicle.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn on the recirculation
mode. An indicator light comes on to show that
it is on.
This mode helps to quickly heat or cool the air inside the
vehicle once the temperature inside the vehicle is equal
to or better than the outside temperature. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
The recirculation mode is not available in outside air,
floor, defog or defrost modes. If the button is selected
while in these modes, the indicator flashes three times.

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.

For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of
the mirror when the rear window defog button is
pressed. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3-34.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.

4-19

Outlet Adjustment

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

Use the thumbwheel located below or to the side of the
outlet, to change the direction of the air flow.

The vehicle has a passenger compartment particulate
air filter. It is located in the engine compartment,
below the air inlet grille on the passenger side.

Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside the vehicle more
effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter, if equipped, may need to replaced.
For more information, see Passenger Compartment
Air Filter on page 4-20 and Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.

• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes
with mild temperature throughout the vehicle, turn
on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging.

4-20

The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering
the climate control system. It needs to be changed
periodically to ensure system performance. For
information on how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.
To change the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers are
in the up position.
2. Raise the vehicle hood.
3. Pull back the hood weatherstrip from the
passengers side of the vehicle halfway to center.

Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.

4. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.
5. Lift the air inlet grille and disconnect the washer
hose at the quick-connect.
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
7. Remove the water deflector plate.

Gages can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to indicate a problem
with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

8. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
9. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
For best climate control system performance, reinstall
the air filter.
For the type of filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7-11.
4-21

Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel has been used and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States Uplevel shown, Base and Canada similar

4-22

Speedometer and Odometer

Safety Belt Reminders

The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (used in the United States) or
in kilometers (used in Canada).

Safety Belt Reminder Light

This vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If the
odometer displays ERROR, it probably has been
tampered with and the numbers might not be accurate.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it
must be set to the mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it will be set at zero and
a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old
mileage reading of the vehicle when the new odometer
was installed.

Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).

When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for several
seconds, then flashes for
several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.

Notice: If the engine is operated with the tachometer
in the shaded warning area, the vehicle could be
damaged, and the damages would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not operate the engine with
the tachometer in the shaded warning area.

4-23

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light

Airbag Readiness Light

Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2-66 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.

The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 2-56.

This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.

4-24

The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
immediately.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44
for more information.

The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-66 for
important safety information. The instrument panel has
a passenger airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know
the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag.

4-25

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.

4-26

Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44 for more
information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.

Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means
the vehicle has a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push, or
the pedal can go closer to the floor. It may take longer
to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-26.

{ WARNING:
United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a problem.

The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.

4-27

Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
The Antilock Brake
System (ABS) light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4-27.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-28

Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with a Traction
Control System (TCS) and
StabiliTrak® warning light,
this light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
When the system is active, the light flashes while the
system is limiting wheel spin or assisting with controlling
the vehicle.
If it stays on or comes on while driving a SERVICE
TRACTION CONTROL message appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). This indicates that there could
be a problem with the traction control system and the
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on
and the SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message
appears on the DIC, the system does not limit wheel spin.

If the traction control system is manually turned off, this
light comes on and the TRACTION CONTROL OFF
message appears on the DIC.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44 for
more information.

Electronic Stability Control Indicator
Light
This light comes on briefly
while the engine is started.
If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the
system is working normally
the indicator light will then
go off.

This light can come on after the vehicle is first driven
and the STABILITRAK NOT READY message appears
in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5-6 for more information.
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving a
SERVICE STABILITRAK message appears in the DIC.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system and the vehicle
may need service. When this warning light is on and the
SERVICE STABILITRAK message appears on the DIC,
the ESC system does not assist in controlling the vehicle.
When the system is active, the light flashes while the
system is assisting in controlling the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5-6 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44 for more
information.

4-29

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light goes off.

United States

Canada

Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-29. The vehicle’s
engine could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves toward the “H” (United States) or
torward the shaded thermostat (Canada), it means that
the engine coolant has overheated. If the vehicle has
been operating under normal driving conditions, pull off
the road, stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible.

The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.

See Engine Overheating on page 6-29 for more
information.

If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6-29
for more information.

4-30

Tire Pressure Light

When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
on page 6-62 for more information.

For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system,
this light comes on briefly when the engine is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4-37 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe
to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-59 for more
information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.

4-31

If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6-3.

4-32

This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.

Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6-10. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6-6.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.

4-33

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs

Oil Pressure Light

Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been replaced or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

4-34

{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.

This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.

Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.

Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3-17.

The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4-11 for more information.

Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4-6 for more information.

4-35

Highbeam On Light

An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.

This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4-5
for more information.

gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the fuel tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when while turning a corner

Fuel Gage

or speeding up.

• The gage does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.

United States

Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage indicates about
how much fuel is left in the fuel tank.
4-36

Driver Information Center (DIC)

DIC Operation and Displays

Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the instrument panel cluster.

All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the speedometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel,
to the right of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The bottom line of the DIC shows the shift
lever position indicator. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 3-24 for more information.
If your vehicle has these features, the DIC also displays
the compass direction and the outside air temperature
when viewing the trip and fuel information. The compass
direction appears on the top right corner of the DIC
display. The outside air temperature automatically
appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display.
If there is a problem with the system that controls the
temperature display, the numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.

DIC Buttons
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the following
pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy,
instantaneous economy, Active Fuel Management™
indicator on vehicles with this feature, and average
speed.

The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4-51 for
more information.
4-37

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings, compass
zone and compass calibration on vehicles with this
feature, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming.
U (Customization):

Press this button to customize
the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-51 for more information.

V (Set/Reset):

Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel):

Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:

Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).

4-38

Trip A and Trip B
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B
displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the
last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers
can be used at the same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was
last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not
reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.
For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)
before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset
feature is activated, the display will show 5 miles (8 km).
As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then
increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display
will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that
were driven during the last ignition cycle.

Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of remaining
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven
without refueling.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate
will change if driving conditions change. For example, if
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a
freeway, the number may change even though the same
amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different fuel economies.
Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy
than city driving.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message displays. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-44 for more
information.

Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset this display to zero, press
and hold the set/reset button.

Instantaneous Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until INST ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the current fuel economy at a
particular moment and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. This display shows the instantaneous
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average economy,
this screen cannot be reset.

Average Speed
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
(km/h). This average is calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value.
To reset the value, press and hold the set/reset button.
The display will return to zero.

Blank Display
This display shows no information.
4-39

Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information):

Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:

Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of
the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert
you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See
“CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4-44. You should change the
oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil on page 6-15.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not
to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine
oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.
4-40

Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.

Tire Pressure
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle
information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
information button again until the DIC displays REAR
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to add air to a
specific tire will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-59 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-44 for more information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.

Change Compass Zone
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass
on page 4-42.

Calibrate Compass
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see DIC Compass on page 4-42.

Relearn Remote Key
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. This procedure
will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.

To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.

Blank Display
This display shows no information.

4-41

DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.

4-42

2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.

Compass Calibration

To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:

The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.

Compass Calibration Procedure

If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after making
turns, there may be a strong magnetic field interfering
with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount, a magnetic
emergency light, magnetic note pad holder, or any other
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the magnetic
item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass.

1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS.

4-43

DIC Warnings and Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some
action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press the set/reset button to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear
it from the DIC display. Pressing any of the DIC buttons
also acknowledges and clears any messages. Some
messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the messages will only make
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.

This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF

Acknowledging the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.
That must be done at the OIL LIFE screen under the
vehicle information menu. See “Oil Life” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4-37 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 6-18.

This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off. See Exterior Lamps on page 4-9 for
more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on. See Exterior Lamps on page 4-9 for
more information.
4-44

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for the
vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on
page 6-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3
for more information.

DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.

ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the A/C
operation automatically resumes. You can continue to
drive your vehicle. If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible to avoid compressor damage.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 6-29 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6-29
for more information.
This message displays along with a continuous chime
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-29.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.

4-45

ERROR

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

This message displays while viewing the odometer or
trip odometers if there is a problem with the instrument
panel cluster. See your dealer/retailer for service.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 6-15 for more information.

FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when your vehicle is low on
fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gage on page 4-36 and Filling the Tank on page 6-10
for more information.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure
Light on page 4-34.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when the hood is not closed
properly. Make sure that the hood is closed completely.
See Hood Release on page 6-13.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible when this message is displayed.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.

This message displays when the front passenger door
is not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.

4-46

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3-4 and DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4-37 for more information.

This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4-24 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM

This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-4.

This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this
problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by your
dealer/retailer immediately.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed properly. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.

This message displays when service is required on the
brake system. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. The brake
system warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4-27.

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop
in heating and air conditioning efficiency.

4-47

SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when a problem is detected
with the power steering system. When this message is
displayed, you may notice that the effort required to steer
the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you will still be
able to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer immediately.

SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays if there has been a problem
detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 5-6 for more information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the
road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting
the system by turning the ignition off and then back on.
If this message still stays on or turns back on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
system inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.
4-48

The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to
take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off
the engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation on page 3-18 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See
Tire Pressure Light on page 4-31. Several conditions may
cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 6-62 for more information. If the
warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem
with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the system is not functioning
properly. A warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 4-28. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-7 for more information. Have
the TCS serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

STABILITRAK NOT READY
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message may display and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The ESC system is not functional until the light has turned
off. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5-6 for
more information.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.

THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3-17 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may be displayed if the gas cap is not
on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gas cap to ensure
that it is on properly. See Filling the Tank on page 6-10
for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the TPMS is
re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. The tire
positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or
after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-65, Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6-60, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-59 for
more information.

4-49

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one
or more of the vehicle’s tires is low. This message also
displays LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right front),
LEFT RR (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate
the location of the low tire. The low tire pressure warning
light will also come on. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 4-31. You can receive more than one tire pressure
message at a time. To read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset
button. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC,
stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 6-51, Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-20, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-59. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-37.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the TCS turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7
for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.

4-50

Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to
turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 5-7 for more information.

• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.

TRACTION CONTROL ON
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays when the TCS is turned on.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7
for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle
until it cools down. If the warning message continues to
display, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.

TRUNK OPEN
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 3-12.

TURN SIGNAL ON

DIC Vehicle Customization

This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4-4.

Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.

This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The message will not
disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off,
or a turn is completed.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir as soon
as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6-14 for the location of the windshield washer
reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6-33 for more information.

All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.

4-51

Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).

DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.

Feature Settings Menu Items

FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.

The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:

ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.

4-52

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock on page 3-11 for more information.

This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if any of the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3-4
for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.

HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when
you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.

HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock
button is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous command.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
4-53

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you
will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3-4 for more
information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-54

EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

APPROACH LIGHTING

CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.

Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 3-4 for more information.

Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-55

REMOTE START

FACTORY SETTINGS

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows you
to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 3-7 for more information.

This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.

Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the
DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to
exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.

4-56

Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.

Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.

{ WARNING:

This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.

• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5-2.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3-21 for more information.

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.

4-57

Setting the Clock
Without Date Display
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player
This radio has a

H button for setting the time.

To set the time:
1. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing on
display. Press H a second time and the minutes
begin flashing on display.
2. To increase or decrease the time, do one of the
following while the hours or minutes are flashing:

• Turn the f knob.
• Press ¨SEEK or ©SEEK.
• Press \ FWD or s REV.
3. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time,
or wait five seconds until the flashing stops and the
current time displayed is automatically set.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is displayed.
Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn the f knob to the
desired option to select the setting. Press the H button
again to apply the setting, or let the screen time out.
4-58

With Date Display
Single CD (MP3) Player
This radio has a

H button for setting the time.

To set the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
tabs to be changed.
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:

•
•
•
•

Press the pushbutton below the selected tab.

f knob clockwise.
Press ¨SEEK.
Press \ FWD.
Turn the

5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:

• Turn the f knob counter-clockwise.
• Press ©SEEK.
• Press s REV.

The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
with display times out after a few seconds and goes
back to the normal radio and time display.

Radio(s)

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton located
under the forward arrow tab. Once the time 12H and
24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.

Radio with CD

4-59

Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have the Radio Data System (RDS)
feature. RDS is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station
can broadcast incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.

Playing the Radio
Radio with CD (MP3)

O (Power/Volume):

Press to turn the system on

and off.
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
The radio goes to the previous volume setting when the
radio is turned on. The volume can still be adjusted by
using the volume knob.

4-60

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The Radio with
CD (MP3) has SCV. SCV automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the
vehicle increases or decreases speed while driving. The
volume level should sound about the same while driving.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM™. The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press to go to the previous or the next
station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio goes to
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (Radio with CD (Base)):

Press to
switch the display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press to display
the time.

4 (Information) (With XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press to display additional
text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM
station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is
available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the
song title information displays on the top line of the
display and artist information displays on the bottom line.
When information is not available, No Info displays.

4-61

Setting Preset Stations (Radio with CD)
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons. To program presets:

FAV (Favorites): Press to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. To store a
station as a favorite:

1. Turn the radio on.

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.

3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.

Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
(Radio with CD (MP3))
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature.
See Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
If the vehicle has XM and has a FAV button, a maximum
of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the
six softkeys below the radio station frequency tabs and by
using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).

4-62

3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds. When that softkey is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station you want
stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the softkey below the displayed page
numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency tabs and to begin the process
of programming favorites for the chosen amount of
numbered pages.

Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones, such as BASS, MID,
and TREB. To adjust the tone settings, press the f knob
until the tone control tabs display. Press the softkey
under the desired tab, then turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the
desired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is
weak, or has static, decrease the treble.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange, or
treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey under
the BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) tab for more
than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone
and speaker controls to the middle position by pressing
the f knob for more than two seconds until the radio
beeps once.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
settings.

To return to the manual mode, press until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass and
depending on the radio, midrange, or treble by
pressing the f knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the ` if the radio has this symbol, or
the f knob until the speaker control tabs display.
Continue pressing the f knob to highlight the desired
tab, or press the softkey under the desired tab. Turn
the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
setting. The setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV until the
desired levels are obtained.
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to
the middle position by pressing the softkey under the BAL
or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps
once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all speaker
and tone controls to the middle position by pressing
the f knob for more than two seconds until the radio
beeps once.

4-63

Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)

3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.

CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature. To select and find a desired category:

4. Press the softkey located under the Remove tab
until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.

1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the SEEK arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display favorites again.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.

4-64

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey under the Restore
All tab.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Loc or Locked: If Loc or Locked displays, it means
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. For more information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4-72 later in this
section for further detail.

Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.

If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

4-65

RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
To use random on the Radio with CD, press the RDM
button to play tracks from a CD in random order. The
random icon displays. Press again to turn off random
play. The random icon disappears from the display.
To use random on the Radio with CD (MP3):
1. Press the CD/AUX button, insert a disc partway into
the slot of the CD player. A RDM tab displays.
2. To play the tracks in random order, press the
softkey under the RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the softkey again to turn
off random play.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat on the Radio with CD:

• Press and release the RPT button to repeat the
current track. An arrow symbol displays. Press
again to turn off repeat play.

• Press and hold the RPT button for a few seconds
to repeat the CD. An arrow symbol displays.
Press again to turn off repeat play. When repeat
is off, the symbol no longer displays.

4-66

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
Found may display.

Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc

Care of the CD Player

CD Messages

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.

CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.

The radio may have MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc
capability. For more information, see Using an MP3
on page 4-68 later in this section.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.
4-67

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio device
such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for
audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
Driving on page 5-2 for more information on driver
distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
While a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume):

Turn to increase or decrease
the volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might need to be made from the portable
device.

4-68

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing until it is stopped or turned off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.

Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have MP3 capability. With this feature,
the radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. Song title, artist name, and album
can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
and ignore the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT button
toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio
format.

MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display,
potentially getting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the f knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no
file folders can also be played. If a CD contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files, the player lets you access and navigate up
to the maximum, but all items over the maximum cannot
be accessed.

4-69

Root Directory

Order of Play

The root directory of the CD is treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory
folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.

Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:

Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.

No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
searches playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
4-70

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new
track name displays.

File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are
shortened. The display does not show parts of words on
the last page of text and the extension of the filename is
not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, you do not have playlist
editing capability using the radio. These playlists
are treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.

Playing an MP3

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the CD
currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey under the
Folder tab to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey under the
Folder tab to go to the first track in the next folder.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume
playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to
on a CD in random, rather than sequential order.
To use random:
1. To play MP3 files in random order from the CD that
is currently playing, press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays. Press
the same softkey again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): If the radio has the MP3
feature, it has the music navigator feature to play MP3
files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album.
Press the softkey below the music navigator tab. The
player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album
ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded
to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin playing
while it is scanning the disc in the background. When the
scan is finished, the CD begins playing again.

s REV (Reverse):

Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release this button to resume playing the
file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
4-71

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing
MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the display between the
arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the
player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files by that artist. If you
want to listen to MP3 files by another artist, press the
softkey below either arrow button. The CD goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either button until the desired artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the softkey below the Sort By tab. From the sort
screen, push one of the softkeys below the album button.
Press the softkey below the back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen. Now the album name displays on
the second line between the arrows and songs from the
current album begins to play. Once all songs from that
album have played, the player moves to the next album
in alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3
files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.

4-72

XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for that
preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having the vehicle serviced, check
with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.

No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.

Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.

Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

4-73

Bluetooth®

Audio System

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more information
on compatible phones.

When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.

Voice Recognition

Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-84 for more
information.

The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.

Bluetooth Controls

Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands
if there is too much background noise.

b g (Push To Talk):

When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.

c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.

4-74

Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.

Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.

Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone.
Use a name that best describes the phone.
This name will be used to indicate which phone is
connected. The system then confirms the name
provided.
6. The system responds with “ has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
4-75

Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

Linking to a Different Phone

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.

3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.

Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete ?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting ”.

4-76

• If another phone is found, the response will be
“ is now connected”.

• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.

Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:

• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory

Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.

• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store . Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4-77

4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store . Does that sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.

Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:

• Delete
• Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting , returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”

4-78

Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.

Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:

•
•
•
•

Dial
Digit Dial
Call
Re-dial

Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.

• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using , please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.

4-79

4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.

• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.

Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the person to call.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, ” and
dials the number.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.

Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using ” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.

4-80

Receiving a Call

Three-Way Calling

When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.

• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.

• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.

• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.

1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.

b g to link all

Ending a Call
Press

c x to end a call.

Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
be muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.

4-81

To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.

To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.

Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing ”.

• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.

4-82

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending ” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial ,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending ” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.

Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

4-83

Other Information
®

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
FCC information.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD is playing.
c x (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if a CD is
playing, to reject an incoming call, or end a current call.

4-84

b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. For
vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth® systems, press and
hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact with
those systems. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide and
Bluetooth® on page 4-74 for more information.
SRCE (Source): Press to choose between the radio
(AM, FM, XM), CD, and auxiliary input jack.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.

¨(Seek):

Press to go to the next radio station while in
AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD.

Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.

AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.

4-85

Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
the vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.

4-86

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.

Section 5

Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............5-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................5-2
Drunk Driving .................................................5-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................5-3
Braking .........................................................5-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................5-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................5-6
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................5-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................5-7
Steering ........................................................5-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................5-11
Passing .......................................................5-11
Loss of Control .............................................5-11
Driving at Night ............................................5-13

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................5-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................5-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................5-15
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................5-16
Winter Driving ..............................................5-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow ...................................................5-19
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................5-20
Loading the Vehicle ......................................5-20
Towing ..........................................................5-26
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................5-26
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................5-26
Towing a Trailer ...........................................5-28

5-1

Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2-12.

{ WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.

5-2

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means

that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if
the person had not been drinking.

Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-7.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.

5-3

Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4-27.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

5-4

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
If the vehicle has ABS, this
warning light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on briefly when the
vehicle is started.

When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins
to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply
the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
with ABS.

5-5

Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise might be
heard, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message will be displayed.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4-37.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is both on and activated.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h).

5-6

You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
When the light is on solid and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message is displayed, the system will not
assist the driver in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But, you can turn ESC off if you ever
need to.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
page 4-6.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.

free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5-19.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The SERVICE
STABILITRAK message and the ESC/TCS light will be
on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer
for service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-44 for more information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3 for more information.

The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message will appear, and the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid to warn the driver that both
traction control and ESC are disabled.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to

Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift
the transmission and apply the front brakes to limit
wheel spin.

5-7

This light will flash when
the TCS is limiting
wheel spin.

The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. Cruise control may be reengaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4-6.
The TCS operates in all transmission shift lever
positions. But the system can upshift the transmission
only as high as the shift lever position chosen, so
use the lower gears only when necessary. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3-24.

5-8

When the system is on,
this warning light comes
on and stays on if there is
a problem.

A SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message also
appears on the DIC. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-44 for more information.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, TCS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed. Turn the system off
if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your
Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5-20 and If Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5-19
for more information.

To turn the system on or
off, press the Traction
Control button located on
the instrument panel.

Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.

When the system is turned off, the traction control
warning light comes on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF
appears on the DIC. If the traction control system is
limiting wheel spin when the button is pressed to turn the
system off, the warning light comes on and the system
will turn off right away.
Press the Traction Control button again to turn the
system back on. The Traction Control warning light
should go off.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3 for more information.

Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.

5-9

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the
vehicle has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the
wheels. See Braking on page 5-4. It is better to remove
as much speed as possible from a collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

5-10

Off-Road Recovery

Passing

The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.

Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.

Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-11

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.

5-12

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If
the vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release
enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling
again. This restores steering control. Push the brake
pedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As
long as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering
control.

Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.

•
•
•
•
•

Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

5-13

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Hydroplaning

Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

{ WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.

5-14

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:

•
•
•
•
•

Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6-51.

• Turn off cruise control.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Highway Hypnosis

To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?

•
•
•
•

Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?

5-15

Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.

{ WARNING:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

5-16

{ WARNING:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.

If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5-7, it improves the ability to accelerate on
slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. When driving through deep snow,
turn off the traction control system to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5-5 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.

5-17

Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7. To
get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

WARNING:

• Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
•
•

{ WARNING:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
WARNING:

5-18

(Continued)

the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.

For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-31.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.

Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5-20.

{ WARNING:
If the vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6-73.

If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.

5-19

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out

Loading the Vehicle

Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
directions causes a rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a
few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on
page 5-26.

It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Vehicle Certification label.

5-20

Tire and Loading Information Label

Label Example

The Tire and Loading Information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includes
the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
more information on tires and inflation, see Tires on
page 6-51 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-59.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).

5-21

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5-22

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5-28 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.

Example 1

Item
A
B
C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =

Example 2

Total

Item

1,000 lbs
(453 kg)

300 lbs (136 kg)

700 lbs (317 kg)

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)

5-23

and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.

Certification Label

Example 3

Item
A
B
C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight

5-24

A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
If there is a heavy load, it should be spread out.

{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice: Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING:
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of the
vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as
far forward as you can. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.

5-25

Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8-7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.

5-26

Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.

• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.

• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5-15.

Dinghy Towing

Dolly Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.

Use the following procedure to dolly tow the vehicle
from the front:

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed,
a dolly should be used. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.

1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
5-27

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the key.

Towing a Trailer

{ WARNING:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.

5-28

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering is
different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering
takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for the safety of the driver and the
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
transmission or other parts could be damaged. The
repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.

• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on the vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8-6 for
more information.

5-29

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20 for more information
about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.

5-30

Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires

Safety Chains

Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-20. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here
are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, then
be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaust can
get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 3-31 in the Index for more information.

Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.

5-31

Driving with a Trailer

Passing

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.

During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.

Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.

5-32

Backing Up

Making Turns

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

Parking on Hills

The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.

{ WARNING:

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.

Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.

Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transmission temperatures
may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent
stops are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 6-29.

If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.

5-33

Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:

• start the engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3 for more
information. Things that are especially important in trailer

5-34

operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil,
belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea
to inspect these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 6-29.

Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.

Section 6

Service and Appearance Care

Service ............................................................6-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................6-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ......................................................6-5
Fuel ................................................................6-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................6-6
Gasoline Specifications ....................................6-6
California Fuel ...............................................6-6
Additives .......................................................6-7
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ..................................6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................6-9
Filling the Tank ............................................6-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................6-12
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................6-12
Hood Release ..............................................6-13
Engine Compartment Overview .......................6-14
Engine Oil ...................................................6-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................6-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................6-22
Cooling System ............................................6-24

Engine Coolant .............................................6-25
Engine Overheating .......................................6-29
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................6-32
Power Steering Fluid .....................................6-32
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................6-33
Brakes ........................................................6-35
Battery ........................................................6-38
Jump Starting ...............................................6-39
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................6-43
Bulb Replacement ..........................................6-43
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................6-43
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................6-44
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................6-47
License Plate Lamp ......................................6-49
Replacement Bulbs .......................................6-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............6-49
Tires ..............................................................6-51
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................6-52
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................6-56
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................6-59

6-1

Section 6

Service and Appearance Care

Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................6-60
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................6-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................6-65
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................6-67
Buying New Tires .........................................6-68
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................6-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................6-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................6-71
Wheel Replacement ......................................6-71
Tire Chains ..................................................6-73
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................6-74
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................6-75
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................6-76
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................6-77
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ................6-83
Compact Spare Tire ......................................6-86
Appearance Care ............................................6-87
Interior Cleaning ...........................................6-87
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................6-88
Leather .......................................................6-89
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................6-90
Care of Safety Belts ......................................6-90

6-2

Weatherstrips ...............................................6-90
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................6-91
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................6-91
Finish Care ..................................................6-92
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................6-92
Aluminum Wheels .........................................6-93
Tires ...........................................................6-93
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................6-94
Finish Damage .............................................6-94
Underbody Maintenance ................................6-94
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................6-94
Vehicle Identification ......................................6-95
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................6-95
Service Parts Identification Label .....................6-95
Electrical System ............................................6-95
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................6-95
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................6-96
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................6-96
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......6-96
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................6-96
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................6-96
Underhood Fuse Block ..................................6-97
Capacities and Specifications ........................6-100

Service

Accessories and Modifications

For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.

When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under
the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2-73.

6-3

California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.

California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{ WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-17.

6-4

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-72.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7-13.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.

Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.

The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6-95.
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K) or
the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M), you can use
either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 6-8. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 6-6.
6-5

Gasoline Octane

California Fuel

Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4-31. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 6-7
for additional information.

6-6

Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.

6-7

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6-95.
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
or the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on page 6-5. In all other
engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described
under Gasoline Octane on page 6-6.
Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
or the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code M) can use 85% ethanol
fuel (E85). We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles
that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a
“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable
sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.

6-8

At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according to
ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly
formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to
gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve
starting. For good starting and heater efficiency below
32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain
no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate
repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch
fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when
using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling
the Tank on page 6-10.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused
by additives would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.

6-9

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and
state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6-8.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap on the
hook on the inside of the fuel door.

6-10

{ WARNING:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6-91.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4-31.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-44 for more information.

{ WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4-31.

6-11

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

Checking Things Under
the Hood

{ WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.

6-12

{ WARNING:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood
release handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located to the left
of the parking brake
pedal.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located near the center of
the hood front, by pushing the latch to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

6-13

Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine (3.9L V6 similar), here is what you will see:

6-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-33.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 6-38.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 6-97.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 6-39.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
under Cooling System on page 6-24.
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 6-24.
G. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 6-32.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6-22.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 6-35.
L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-19.

Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-14
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

6-15

When to Add Engine Oil

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-14 for
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.

V6 Engine

V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 6-100.

6-16

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:

• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
6-17

Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system
must be reset every time the oil is changed.

6-18

When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system might not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message being turned on, reset the system.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-14 for
more information on location.

6-19

When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.

6-20

{ WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
hinges on the housing.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.

6-21

Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3, and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 7-10.

How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

•
•
•
•

When outside temperatures are above 32°C (90°F).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
(180°F to 200°F).

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km
(15 miles) when outside temperatures are above 10°C
(50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), you may have to
drive longer.

6-22

Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
The transmission fluid
dipstick handle is the black
loop with this symbol on it.
It is located near the rear of
the engine compartment.

V6 Engines
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-14
for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-23

How to Add Fluid

Cooling System

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.

The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7-10.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

6-24

3.5L V6 Engine shown, 3.9L Engine similar
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.

Engine Coolant

{ WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6-29

6-25

What to Use

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:

{ WARNING:

• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),

Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),

outside temperature.
engine temperature.

• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core,
and other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-10 for more information.

6-26

Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank
is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done. See Engine Coolant Engine Coolant
for more information.
If your vehicle has one of the V6 engines, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-14.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL line on the coolant recovery
tank. To check the coolant level, look for the COLD FILL
line on the side of the coolant recovery tank that
faces the engine. If the level is not correct, there may
be a leak in the cooling system.

How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank

{ WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at
the COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the cooling system through the
coolant fill neck on the engine, but be sure the system
is cool before you do it.

6-27

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.

If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly
counterclockwise.

{ WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.

6-28

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
that there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 6-25 Engine Coolant
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from
the engine and the compartment.

If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,
you should have a dealer/retailer service department
inspect the vehicle for leaks.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.

Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD FILL line.

There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning light
on the instrument panel that indicate an overheated
engine condition. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 4-30 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on
page 4-30 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light.

5. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap. After a day or two of driving, when the
engine is cold, check the coolant level in the recovery
tank. If it is low, refill it to the COLD FILL line.

6-29

In addition, you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE message displayed on the vehicle’s Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-44 DIC Warnings and Messages
for more information.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 6-32 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.

6-30

If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment

{ WARNING:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 6-32 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see ‘‘Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode’’
later in this section.

6-31

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The coolant temperature gage will indicate
an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km)
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 6-15.

6-32

Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located toward
the rear of the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 6-14 for reservoir
location.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

What to Use

To check the power steering fluid, do the following:

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
Always use the proper fluid.

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-10.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.

Windshield Washer Fluid

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.

The fluid level should be somewhere within the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is at the
ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

6-33

Adding Washer Fluid
A WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when you need to add windshield washer fluid to your
vehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-44
for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until
the tank is full.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-14 for
more information on location.

6-34

windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.

Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-14 for
the location of the reservoir.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.

{ WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:

• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4-27.

• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.

6-35

What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.

{ WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6-91.

Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.

6-36

Brake Pedal Travel

{ WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.

See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.

Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-100.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

6-37

Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-14 for battery location.

{ DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 6-39 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.

6-38

Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.

{ WARNING:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.

6-39

To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal,
remove the fuse block
cover. You should always
use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the
positive (+) terminal on the
battery.

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal for that purpose. The remote
positive (+) terminal is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle, on the underhood fuse block. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-14 for more
information on location.

6-40

{ WARNING:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

{ WARNING:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6-41

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location of the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6-42

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:

Bulb Replacement

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.

For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6-49.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.

Halogen Bulbs

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.

Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.

{ WARNING:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.

6-43

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps

A. Sidemarker
B. Low-Beam
Headlamp

6-44

C. High-Beam
Headlamp
D. Parking/Turn
Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6-13.

2. Remove the screw from the headlamp assembly.

7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb’s base.
8. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.
9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab
on the bulb base into the matching notch in the
retaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn clockwise
until it stops.
10. Reinstall the dust caps.

3. Pull up on the plastic headlamp retainer and
remove it.
4. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle
and remove the electrical connector.
5. Remove the round dust caps to gain access to the
bulbs.
6. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the retaining ring by pulling it away from the
headlamp.
11. Push the headlamp assembly toward the vehicle.

6-45

12. Push down on the plastic headlamp retainer to
reinstall it.

6-46

13. Reinstall the screw from the headlamp assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps

To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-12.
2. Remove the convenience net. Unhook the net from
the upper wing nut.

A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal

3. Turn the upper wing nut counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Pull the carpet away from the rear of the vehicle.

6-47

11. Push the taillamp assembly back into place.
When reinstalling the taillamp assembly, make sure
that you line up the four posts on the assembly
with the slots in the vehicle.
12. Turn the two hex nuts clockwise to reinstall them.
13. Put the carpet back in place at the rear of the
vehicle.

5. Turn the two hex nuts counterclockwise to
remove them.
6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnect the
wiring harness.
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull the old bulb straight out to remove it.
9. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks to
install it.
10. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it.
6-48

14. Turn the upper wing nut clockwise to reinstall.
15. Put the convenience net back into place by hooking
it to the upper wing nut.

Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement

License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Turn the lamp assembly counterclockwise and pull
the lamp assembly out of the connector.
2. Pull the old bulb from the lamp assembly, keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
3. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up
Front Parking/Turn Signal
License Plate Lamp
Headlamps
High-Beam
Low-Beam
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp, and Turn
Signal

Bulb Number
921
3157NAK
194
H9
H11
194
3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from
the blade connecting point, and pull the blade
assembly down toward the windshield to remove it
from the wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip down into place.
6-49

To remove and replace the wiper blade element do the
following:
4. The wiper blade element has two notches at one
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper
blade assembly.
5. To replace the element, start at the heel end of the
wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the base of
the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,
notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.
6. To engage the last claw into the notched end of the
wiper blade element, squeeze the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
7. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set, and that all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the
wiper blade element on both sides.

6-50

A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7-11.

Tires

WARNING:

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-20.
WARNING:

(Continued)

• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-59.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.

6-51

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

6-52

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 6-70.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 6-86 and If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 6-74.
6-53

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.

6-54

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-59.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.

Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.

6-55

Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.

6-56

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6-59.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-20.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-59 and Loading the Vehicle
on page 5-20.

6-57

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6-67.

6-58

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6-70.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-20.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-20.

Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
see Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20. How you
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.

When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 6-86.

6-59

How to Check

Tire Pressure Monitor System

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.

6-60

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-62 for
additional information.

Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.

6-61

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
instrument panel cluster.

At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4-37 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-44.
6-62

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-20, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-59.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 6-65 and Tires on page 6-51.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.

TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:

• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.

• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.

• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6-68.

• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.

6-63

TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.

6-64

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
screen.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the
DIC display screen goes off.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6-67 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-67
and Wheel Replacement on page 6-71.

6-65

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-62.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-100.

{ WARNING:
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-59 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-20.

6-66

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6-75.

When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.

You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.

6-67

Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 6-52 for additional information.

6-68

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less than
a full set of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 6-65 for
information on proper tire rotation.

{ WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 6-86.

Different Size Tires and Wheels

{ WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 6-60.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.

If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.

{ WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6-68 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6-3 for additional information.

6-69

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.

6-70

Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.

Temperature – A, B, C

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.

6-71

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.

{ WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.

6-72

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6-75 for more
information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

WARNING:

{ WARNING:
If your vehicle has P225/55R17 or P235/50R18
size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
WARNING:

(Continued)

conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust, or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use
only SAE Class S-type chains that are the proper
size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.

6-73

If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

6-74

{ WARNING:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 4-3.

{ WARNING:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

WARNING:

(Continued)

To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).

1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
WARNING:

(Continued)
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
6-75

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-12.
2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one.
3. Remove the spare tire cover.

6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Remove the compact spare tire.

6-76

Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
This vehicle may have aluminum wheels with exposed
wheel nuts. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.
Or, this vehicle may have steel wheels with plastic
covers.

The tools you will need to change a tire include the
jack (A), extension and protection guide (B), and wheel
wrench (C).

To remove the plastic covers and wheel nut caps,
loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction. If needed, finish loosening
them with your fingers. The plastic nut caps will not
come off.
6-77

If needed, use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pry
along the edge of the cover until it comes off. The edge of
the wheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay it face
down, as it could become scratched or damaged. Store
the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire is repaired or
replaced.
Once you have removed the wheel cover, use the
following procedure to remove the flat tire and install the
spare tire.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 6-75
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise once on
each wheel nut to loosen them. Do not remove
them yet.

6-78

{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING:
3. For all wheel types, find the jacking location using
the diagram above and the corresponding jacking
notches located on the bottom side of the plastic
molding. The notches in the plastic molding are
marked with a triangle shape to help you find them.
The front location is about 7.0 inches (17.7 cm) from
the rear edge of the front wheel well. The rear
location is about 4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

6-79

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground to install the compact spare tire.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.

6-80

{ WARNING:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6-75.

Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.

7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.

9. Reinstall the wheel nuts
with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
clockwise by hand until
the wheel is held
against the hub.

8. Install the compact spare tire.
6-81

WARNING:

(Continued)

specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking
wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications
on page 6-100 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.

{ WARNING:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
WARNING:
6-82

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6-100 for the wheel nut torque specification.

(Continued)

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools

After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
extension protector, located in the foam holder, to
help avoid wheel surface damage.
To store a full-size tire:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.

{ WARNING:

2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole
and threaded onto the bolt screw.

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.

3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 6-86. Use this as
a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.

6-83

A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
G. Extension Protector
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare Tire
6-84

A. Retainer
B. Full-Size Flat Tire
C. Protective Guide
D. Extension Bolt Screw
E. Wing Nut
F. Jack
G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw

Full-Size Flat Tire
6-85

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a
time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced

6-86

where you want. You must calibrate the tire inflation
monitor system after installing or removing the compact
spare. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-60.
The system may not work correctly when the compact
spare is installed on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case
you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.

Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.

6-87

Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.

• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.

6-88

Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.

To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
formation may result, clean the entire surface.

Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.

6-89

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.

6-90

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

Weatherstrips
If dirt and/or contaminants build up in the glass seals,
use a cloth and water to clean the glass seals. Silicone
grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer,
seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp
weather, frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.

Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6-91.

6-91

Finish Care

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

6-92

Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:

•
•
•
•

Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.

Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.

Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could be damaged.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

6-93

Sheet Metal Damage

Underbody Maintenance

If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

6-94

Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Service Parts Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6-100 for
the vehicle’s engine code.

Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-72 and Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2-73.
6-95

Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse. If the
motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper
will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused
by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel
protect the power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
6-96

The fuse block is located on the passenger side of
the vehicle in the carpet molding. Remove the fuse
block door to access the fuses.

Fuses
PWR/MIR
PWR/SEAT
PWR/WNDW
RAP
S/ROOF
TRUNK
TRUNK
XM

Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP
AUX
CNSTR
DR/LCK
HTD/SEAT

Usage
Airbags
Amplifier
Auxiliary Outlets
Canister
Door Locks
Heated Seats

Usage
Power Mirrors
Power Seats
Power Window
Retained Accessory Power
Sunroof
Trunk
Trunk Relay
XM™ Radio

Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6-14 for more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.

6-97

Fuses
A/C CMPRSR
ABS MTR 1
ABS MTR 2
AIR PUMP
AIR SOL
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
AUX PWR
BATT 1
BATT 2
BATT 3
BATT 4
BCM
CHMSL/
BCK-UP
DISPLAY
DRL 1
DRL 2
ECM IGN
ECM/TCM
EMISSIONS 1
EMISSIONS 2
6-98

Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Motor 1
ABS Motor 2
Air Pump
Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
Airbag, Display
Auxiliary Power
Battery 1
Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 4
Body Control Module (BCM)
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamp
Display
Daytime Running Lamps 1
Daytime Running Lamps 2
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Ignition
ECM, Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
Emissions 1
Emissions 2

Fuses
ETC/ECM
FAN 1
FAN 2
FOG LAMPS
FUEL/PUMP
HDLP MDL
HORN
HTD MIR
INJ 1
INJ 2
INT LIGHTS
INT LTS/PNL
DIM
LT HI BEAM
LT LO BEAM
LT PARK
LT SPOT
LT T/SIG
ONSTAR
PWR
DROP/CRANK
RADIO
RT HI BEAM

Usage
Electronic Throttle Control, ECM
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Fuel Pump
Headlamp Module
Horn
Heated Mirror
Injector 1
Injector 2
Interior Lamps
Interior Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimmer
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Driver Side Parking Lamp
Left Spot
Driver Side Turn Signal Lamp
OnStar®
Power Drop, Crank
Audio System
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp

Fuses

RT PARK
RT SPOT
RT T/SIG
RVC SEN
STRG WHL
STRTR
TRANS
WPR
WSW

Usage
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Passenger Side Parking Lamp
Right Spot
Passenger Side Turn Signal Lamp
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
Steering Wheel
Starter
Transmission
Wiper
Windshield Wiper

Relay
A/C CMPRSR
FAN 1
FAN 2
FAN 3
FUEL/PUMP
PWR/TRN
REAR DEFOG
STRTR

Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Fuel Pump
Powertrain
Rear Defogger
Starter

RT LO BEAM

6-99

Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in Metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-10 for more information.
Application

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
7.0 L
7.4 qt

Automatic Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
9.6 L
10.1 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
3.8 L
4.0 qt
Fuel Tank
3.5L V6 Engine (with NU6 emissions)
64.4 L
17.0 gal
3.5L V6 Engine (without NU6 emissions)
66.2 L
17.5 gal
3.9L V6 Engine
66.2 L
17.5 gal
Wheel Nut Torque
140 Y
100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

6-100

Engine Specifications
VIN Code

Transmission

Spark Plug Gap

3.5L V6

Engine

Automatic

1.01 mm (0.040 in)

3.5L Flexible Fuel V6

Automatic

1.01 mm (0.040 in )

3.9L Flexible Fuel V6

Automatic

1.01 mm (0.040 in )

6-101

✍ NOTES

6-102

Section 7

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-2
Introduction ...................................................7-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................7-3
Owner Checks and Services ............................7-8

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............7-10
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................7-11
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................7-12
Maintenance Record .....................................7-13

7-1

Maintenance Schedule

{ WARNING:
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary to
keep this vehicle in good working condition. Damage
caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-20.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6-6.

7-2

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6-4.
At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be
certain that you will receive the highest level of service
available. Your dealer /retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement
parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-10 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 7-11. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.

Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6-65.

Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-15. An Emission Control Service.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible,
within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
the best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a

year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who
will perform this work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the
vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last
service. Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is
changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
The services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be performed when:

• Maintenance I was performed the last time the
engine oil was changed.

• It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Engine Oil Soon message has displayed or since the
last service.

7-3

Maintenance I
• Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-15. An Emission Control Service.

• Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-25.

• Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-33.

• Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-59.

• Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-65.

• Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6-65.

• Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.

• Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-19.

• Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).

Maintenance II
• Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
• Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.

• Engine cooling system inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.

• Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and wiper
blade cleaning, if contaminated. See Windshield
and Wiper Blades on page 6-92. Worn or damaged
wiper blade replacement. See Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 6-49.

• Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and rear compartment hinges
lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-10. More frequent lubrication
may be required when vehicle is exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

• Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2-74.

7-4

• Automatic transmission fluid level check and adding
fluid, if needed. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6-22.

• Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-19.

• Passenger compartment air filter replacement
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
More frequent replacement may be required if
vehicle is driven regularly under dusty conditions.

Once a Year
• Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7-8.

• Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7-8.

• Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7-8.

Additional Required Services

• Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner

At Each Fuel Stop
• Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on

• Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure

page 6-15.

• Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-25.

• Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-33.

Once a Month
• Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-59.

• Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and

Checks and Services on page 7-8.
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
page 6-24.

• Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection
for loose or damaged components.

• Throttle system inspection for interference, binding
or for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.

Rotation on page 6-65.

7-5

First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
• Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
• Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-19.

• Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6-22.

First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
• Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6-22.

• Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires
inspection. An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
• Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6-25.
An Emission Control Service.

• Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.

7-6

Scheduled Maintenance
Service

Maintenance I

Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.

•

Engine coolant level check.

•

Windshield washer fluid level check.

•

Tire inflation pressures check.

•

Tire wear inspection.

•

Rotate tires.

•

Fluids visual leak check.

•

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).

•

Brake system inspection.

•

Steering and suspension inspection.

•

Engine cooling system inspection.

•

Windshield wiper blades inspection.

•

Body components lubrication.

•

Restraint system components check.

•

Passenger compartment air filter replacement.

•

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).

•

7-7

Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check

{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3-27.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3-27.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.

7-8

Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).

• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.

• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

{ WARNING:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.

7-9

Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Engine Oil
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 6-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-25.
3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake DOT
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
System
in Canada 89021320).
Windshield
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer

7-10

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
GM
Power
Steering Fluid
Power Steering (GM Part No.
U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Secondary
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part

GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

10350737

A2962C

19210285

PF61

15284938

CF132

12591131

41-100

Driver - 21.7 in (55.0 cm)

15941731

—

Passenger - 21.7 in (55.0 cm)

15941732

—

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
3.5L V6, 3.5L and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines
Wiper Blades

7-11

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.5L V6 and 3.9 V6 Engines

7-12

Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

7-13

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

7-14

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

7-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

7-16

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Services Performed

Section 8

Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance and Information ...............8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................8-2
Online Owner Center ......................................8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................8-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................8-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................8-11
Courtesy Transportation Program ....................8-11
Collision Damage Repair ................................8-13

Reporting Safety Defects ................................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....8-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................8-18
Event Data Recorders ...................................8-19
Navigation System ........................................8-20
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ...................................8-20
Radio Frequency Statement ...........................8-20

8-1

Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.

8-2

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.

8-3

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in about
70 days. We believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it
is informal, quick, and free of charge.

8-4

For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).

Online Owner Center

My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet

My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.

Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more

•
•
•
•
•

Online service and maintenance records
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
Exclusive privileges and offers
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
®

OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries

Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred
GM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter

• FAQ
• Contact Us

8-5

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users

From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994

Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:

United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)

8-6

Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program

The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

8-7

Calling for Assistance

Coverage

When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:

Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.

• Your name, home address, and home telephone

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.

number

• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

8-8

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.

Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.

Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.

8-9

Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided
through this service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic
route. There is a limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.

8-10

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed
receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.

• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor
for repairs not covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service Appointments

Courtesy Transportation Program

When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.

Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.

8-11

Transportation Options

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.

Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.

Additional Program Information

8-12

All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.

Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your

vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.

8-13

Insuring Your Vehicle

If a Crash Occurs

Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.

Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8-7 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
8-14

• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws,
a report may not be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and both vehicles
are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
8-15

Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer/retailer, or General
Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.

8-16

Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.

Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.

8-17

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time

Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy

For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com

Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.

Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

8-18

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.

8-19

Navigation System

Radio Frequency Statement

If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.

This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.

Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.

8-20

2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 6-3
Accessory Power ............................................ 3-21
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 4-15
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 6-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 6-95
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 6-19
Air Conditioning .............................................. 4-16
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................... 4-20
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 2-73
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 2-63
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 2-66
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 2-72
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 2-63
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 2-64
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 2-61
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 2-59
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 4-25
Readiness Light .......................................... 4-24
System Check ............................................. 2-56
Antenna
Backglass ................................................... 4-86
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ...................................................... 4-86

Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 5-5
Warning Light ............................................. 4-28
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 6-93
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 6-90
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 6-94
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 6-91
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 6-88
Finish Care ................................................. 6-92
Finish Damage ............................................ 6-94
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 6-90
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 6-87
Leather ...................................................... 6-89
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 6-94
Tires .......................................................... 6-93
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-94
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-91
Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-90
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-92
Ashtray ......................................................... 4-16
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 8-7
Audio System ................................................. 4-57
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 4-84
Radio Reception .......................................... 4-85
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-58
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 4-84
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 4-86
Audio System(s) ............................................. 4-59

Automatic Door Lock ....................................... 3-10
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 6-22
Operation ................................................... 3-24

B
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 4-86
Battery .......................................................... 6-38
Electric Power Management .......................... 4-13
Run-Down Protection ................................... 4-14
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 7-12
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 4-74
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 5-6
Brakes .......................................................... 6-35
Antilock ....................................................... 5-5
Parking ...................................................... 3-27
System Warning Light .................................. 4-27
Braking ........................................................... 5-4
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 5-6
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 3-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 6-49
Fog Lamps ................................................. 4-11
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 6-43
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 6-43
Headlamps ................................................. 6-43

Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ..................................
License Plate Lamps ....................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps .................
Buying New Tires ...........................................

6-44
6-49
6-47
6-68

C
Calibration ..................................................... 4-42
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 6-4
Warning ....................................................... 6-4
California Fuel .................................................. 6-6
Canadian Owners ............................................... iii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 6-100
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 3-31
Trunk ......................................................... 3-12
Winter Driving ............................................. 5-17
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 6-90
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 4-68
Center Console Storage ................................... 3-42
Center Seat ..................................................... 2-9
Chains, Tire ................................................... 6-73

Charging System Light ....................................
Check
Engine Lamp ..............................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..........
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
Systems .....................................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Circuit Breakers ..............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................
Interior .......................................................

4-26
4-31
6-12
6-94
2-35
2-43
2-32
2-49
2-52
2-52
2-39
2-42
4-16
6-96
6-93
6-91
6-88
6-92
6-90
6-87

Cleaning (cont.)
Leather ...................................................... 6-89
Tires .......................................................... 6-93
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-94
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-91
Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-90
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-92
Climate Control System ................................... 4-16
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 4-20
Climate Controls ............................................. 1-14
Clock, Setting ................................................. 4-58
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 8-13
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 6-86
Compass ....................................................... 4-42
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 3-17
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 5-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 3-42
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 6-25
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 4-30
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 4-30
Cooling System .............................................. 6-24
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 4-11
Courtesy Transportation Program ...................... 8-11
Cruise Control .................................................. 4-6
Light .......................................................... 4-35
Cupholders .................................................... 3-42

Customer Assistance ......................................... 8-6
Offices ......................................................... 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 8-2

D
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 8-13
Data Recorders, Event .................................... 8-19
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ....................................... 4-10
Defensive Driving ............................................. 5-2
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 4-12
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 4-13
Delayed Locking ............................................. 3-10
DIC Compass ................................................. 4-42
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 4-68
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 6-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 4-11
Door
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 3-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 3-10
Locks .......................................................... 3-9
Power Locks ............................................... 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 3-11

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 4-37
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 4-37
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 4-51
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-44
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 5-13
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 5-15
Defensive ..................................................... 5-2
Drunk .......................................................... 5-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 5-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 5-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 5-14
Loss of Control ........................................... 5-11
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 5-11
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 5-20
Winter ........................................................ 5-17
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ....................... 1-21

E
E85 Fuel ......................................................... 6-8
EDR ............................................................. 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On ............................ 6-95
Electrical System
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 6-96
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 6-96
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-96

Electrical System (cont.)
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 6-96
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 6-97
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 6-96
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 3-18
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 3-18
Electronic Stability Control ................................. 5-6
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 6-19
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 4-31
Compartment Overview ................................ 6-14
Coolant ...................................................... 6-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 3-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 4-30
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 4-30
Cooling System ........................................... 6-24
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 7-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 3-31
Oil ............................................................. 6-15
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 6-32
Overheating ................................................ 6-29
Starting ...................................................... 3-21
Engine Oil
Life System ................................................ 6-18
Entry Lighting ................................................. 4-12

Event Data Recorders ..................................... 8-19
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 2-31
Exterior Lamps ................................................. 4-9

F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 6-19
Finish Damage ............................................... 6-94
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 4-3
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 4-5
Flat Tire ........................................................ 6-74
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 6-75
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 6-83
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 6-22
Power Steering ........................................... 6-32
Windshield Washer ...................................... 6-33
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 4-11
Light .......................................................... 4-35
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 2-10
Fuel ............................................................... 6-5
Additives ...................................................... 6-7
California Fuel .............................................. 6-6
E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 6-8

Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 6-12
Filling the Tank ........................................... 6-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 6-9
Gage ......................................................... 4-36
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 6-6
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 6-6
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better ......................................... 1-21
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 6-96
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-96
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 6-97
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 6-96

G
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 4-30
Fuel .......................................................... 4-36
Speedometer .............................................. 4-23
Tachometer ................................................. 4-23
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 3-35
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 6-6
Specifications ............................................... 6-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 3-42
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 8-7

H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 6-43
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 4-3
Head Restraints ............................................... 2-2
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 6-96
Headlamps
Aiming ....................................................... 6-43
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 6-43
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System .................................... 4-10
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 4-9
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 4-5
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 6-44
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-5
Heated Seats ................................................... 2-6
Heater ........................................................... 4-16
Engine Coolant ........................................... 3-23
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 4-36
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 5-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 5-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 6-12
Release ..................................................... 6-13
Horn ............................................................... 4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 2-17

I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 3-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 2-35
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 6-59
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 4-11
Cluster ....................................................... 4-22
Introduction ...................................................... 7-2

J
Jump Starting ................................................. 6-39

K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System ................................... 3-4
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 3-4
Keys ............................................................... 3-3

L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Courtesy ....................................................
Dome ........................................................
License Plate ..............................................

6-52
4-11
4-11
6-49

Lamps (cont.)
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 4-31
Map .......................................................... 4-13
Reading ..................................................... 4-13
Lap Belt ........................................................ 2-30
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 2-25
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 2-43
Lighting
Delayed Entry ............................................. 4-12
Delayed Exit ............................................... 4-13
Entry ......................................................... 4-12
Parade Dimming .......................................... 4-13
Lights
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 4-24
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 4-28
Brake System Warning ................................. 4-27
Charging System ......................................... 4-26
Cruise Control ............................................. 4-35
Electronic StabiliTrak Control Indicator ............ 4-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 4-30
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 4-9
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 4-5
Fog Lamps ................................................. 4-35
Highbeam On ............................................. 4-36
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-5
Oil Pressure ............................................... 4-34
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 4-25
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 4-23

Lights (cont.)
Security ..................................................... 4-35
Tire Pressure .............................................. 4-31
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 4-28
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-20
Locks
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 3-10
Delayed Locking .......................................... 3-10
Door ........................................................... 3-9
Lockout Protection ....................................... 3-12
Power Door ................................................ 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 3-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 3-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 5-11
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 2-43
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 2-5

M
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record .................................... 7-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 7-11
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-10
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 4-31
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 2-5

Manual Seats ................................................... 2-4
Map Lamps .................................................... 4-13
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-44
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 3-33
Manual Rearview ......................................... 3-33
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 3-34
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 3-34
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 3-34
MP3 ............................................................. 4-68

N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 8-20
Net, Convenience ........................................... 3-42
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 3-19

O
Odometer ......................................................
Off-Road
Recovery ....................................................
Oil
Engine .......................................................
Engine Oil Life System .................................
Pressure Light .............................................

4-23
5-11
6-15
6-18
4-34

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 2-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 8-5
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 3-35
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 4-20
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 4-15
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 3-34
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 3-34
Power Mirrors ............................................. 3-34
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ... 6-32
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 7-8
Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii

P
Paint, Damage ...............................................
Parade Dimming .............................................
Park
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Parking
Brake ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .....................

6-94
4-13
3-28
3-29
3-27
3-30
4-25

Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 4-20
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 2-66
Passing ......................................................... 5-11
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................... 3-18
Perchlorate Materials Requirements,
California ..................................................... 6-4
Phone
Bluetooth® .................................................. 4-74
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 3-10
Electrical System ......................................... 6-96
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 3-21
Seat ............................................................ 2-5
Steering Fluid ............................................. 6-32
Windows .................................................... 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 2-30
Privacy .......................................................... 8-18
Navigation System ....................................... 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 8-11
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 3-11
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 6-4

R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ..................................... 8-20
Statement ................................................... 8-20
Radio(s) ........................................................ 4-59
Radios
Reception ................................................... 4-85
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-58
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 4-84
Reading Lamps .............................................. 4-13
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 3-11
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 3-42
Rear Storage ................................................. 3-42
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 3-33
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 3-33
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 2-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 7-10
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 5-26
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 3-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 6-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 6-76
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 6-49

Replacement Parts
Maintenance ............................................... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 8-16
General Motors ........................................... 8-16
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 2-75
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 3-21
Ride Control Systems ....................................... 5-6
Electronic Stability (ESC) ................................ 5-6
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 5-20
Roof
Sunroof ...................................................... 3-43
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 3-32

S
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 6-90
Extender .................................................... 2-31
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 2-17

Safety Belts (cont.)
Lap Belt ..................................................... 2-30
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 2-25
Reminders .................................................. 4-23
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 2-12
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 2-30
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government .................................. 8-16
General Motors ........................................... 8-16
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 7-3
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 8-11
Seats
Center Seat .................................................. 2-9
Head Restraints ............................................ 2-2
Heated Seats ............................................... 2-6
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 2-5
Power Seats ................................................. 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 2-6
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 2-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 2-52
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 2-49
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 2-52

Security
Light .......................................................... 4-35
Service ........................................................... 6-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ..................................................... 6-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 6-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 4-31
Parts Identification Label ............................... 6-95
Publications Ordering Information ................... 8-17
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 8-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 2-72
Setting the Clock ............................................ 4-58
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 6-94
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 3-29
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 3-28
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 4-4
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 6-86
Installing .................................................... 6-77
Removing ................................................... 6-76
Storing ....................................................... 6-83
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 6-100
Speedometer .................................................. 4-23

Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 2-10
StabiliTrak Control Indicator Light, Electronic ....... 4-29
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 3-7
Starting the Engine ......................................... 3-21
Steering .......................................................... 5-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 4-84
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console ........................................... 3-42
Convenience Net ......................................... 3-42
Cupholders ................................................. 3-42
Glove Box .................................................. 3-42
Rear .......................................................... 3-42
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 3-42
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .................. 3-42
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 5-19
Sun Visors ..................................................... 3-16
Sunroof ......................................................... 3-43

T
Tachometer .................................................... 4-23
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and
Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 6-47
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 8-6

Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................... 4-84
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 3-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 3-18
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 3-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 4-3
Time, Setting .................................................. 4-58
Tires ............................................................. 6-51
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 6-93
Buying New Tires ........................................ 6-68
Chains ....................................................... 6-73
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 6-75
Cleaning .................................................... 6-93
Compact Spare ........................................... 6-86
Different Size .............................................. 6-69
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 6-74
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 6-59
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 6-65
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 6-77
Pressure Light ............................................. 4-31
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 6-62
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 6-60
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 6-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 6-76
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 6-52

Tires (cont.)
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 6-83
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 6-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 6-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 6-71
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 6-71
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 6-67
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 5-26
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 5-28
Your Vehicle ............................................... 5-26
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 5-7
Control System Warning Light ....................... 4-28
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 6-22
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 3-24
Transportation Program, Courtesy ...................... 8-11
Trunk ............................................................ 3-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 4-4

U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 6-70
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 3-35
Operation ................................................... 3-35

V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 5-3
Loading ...................................................... 5-20
Remote Start ................................................ 3-7
Running While Parked .................................. 3-32
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 4-51
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 6-95
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 6-95
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 4-20
Visors ........................................................... 3-16

W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 4-21
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-44
Hazard Flashers ............................................ 4-3
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 6-71
Different Size .............................................. 6-69
Replacement ............................................... 6-71

When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 6-67
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 2-42
Windows ....................................................... 3-14
Power ........................................................ 3-15
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 4-6
Washer Fluid .............................................. 6-33
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 6-49
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 6-92
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 6-96
Wipers ......................................................... 4-5
Winter Driving ................................................ 5-17

X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 4-72
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna ..................................................... 4-86

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : 
Modified                        : 2014:11:06 14:18:08.113-05:00
Creator                         : EDS
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 2357547
Author                          : EDS
Extracted                       : 2014:11:03 10:18:21.58-05:00
Sha 1                           : 549aaf32f1fc05346ca85f4bcd9c2b065b59f20e
Modify Date                     : 2009:06:08 09:34:03-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:06:08 09:34:03-04:00
Create Date                     : 2009:06:05 10:02:55-04:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Keywords                        : 
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/2010/chevrolet/impala, OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual
Instance ID                     : uuid:af71bd17-cb6b-49c3-8a6d-e6d46c4e9363
Document ID                     : uuid:7c88cdfa-2ff1-49e0-a682-05969a9dc065
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 422

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Chevrolet 2010 Impala Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation